1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga

Most Trusted Storage Solution Provider

 

We’ve provided builds for thousands (and counting) of

satisfied homeowners and businesses.

1-877-275-7048

131+ Garage Configurations In Stock | Free Install on All Tubular Steel Orders

Metal Garages & Steel Garage Kits For Sale

Fully enclosed prefabricated steel garages with free delivery and professional installation in all 48 contiguous states. Standard, triple-wide and lean-to configurations. 12 or 14 gauge galvanized frames with a 20-year rust-through warranty.

$6,775
Starting Price
48
States Served
20yr
12-GA Warranty
$0
Install Fee
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 481–503 of 503 resultsSorted by price: low to high

18x20 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 360 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

18×20 Garage with Loft

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Garage with Loft | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Garage with Loft
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Garage with Loft

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Garage with Loft, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners who want vertical storage spec 12-14 ft legs and add an engineered mezzanine over the back 8 ft of the building. The loft holds seasonal totes, hunting gear, or a future bunk space while the floor stays open.

You’re viewing:Garage with Loft·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered Loft
  • 14′ Legs
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-GARAGE-LOFTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 garage with loft.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Homeowners who want vertical storage spec 12-14 ft legs and add an engineered mezzanine over the back 8 ft of the building.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Garage with Loft layout.

Homeowners who want vertical storage spec 12-14 ft legs and add an engineered mezzanine over the back 8 ft of the building. The loft holds seasonal totes, hunting gear, or a future bunk space while the floor stays open for the vehicle. Stamped drawings cover the loft load.

💡 Pro tip:Garage with Loft works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Garage with Loft in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garage with Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garage with Loft spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garage with Loft.

DAILY USEEveryday garage with loft
Everyday garage with loft
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garage with loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarage with loft + seasonal storage
garage with loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Garage with Loft, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 garage with loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garage with Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Garage with Loft buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Garage with Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garage with Loft · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garage with Loft also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garage with Loft questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 garage with loft cost?

A 18×20 garage with loft from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 garage with loft price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garage with loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 garage with loft?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garage with loft different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 garage with loft need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 garage with loft delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 garage with loft without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 garage with loft.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 garage with loft?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 garage with loft in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 garage with loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 garage with loft typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garage with Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
18x20 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 360 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

18×20 Garage with Loft

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
18x20 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 360 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

18×20 Tool Shed

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Tool Shed | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Tool Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Tool Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Tool Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners with a serious tool collection use this footprint as a dedicated tool shed separate from vehicle storage. Wall-to-wall French cleat boards, a rolling tool chest, and a workbench leave a clear floor for.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Slide Bolt Lock
  • Walk-In Door
  • 14 GA Standard
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-TOOL-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 tool shed.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Homeowners with a serious tool collection use this footprint as a dedicated tool shed separate from vehicle storage.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Tool Shed layout.

Homeowners with a serious tool collection use this footprint as a dedicated tool shed separate from vehicle storage. Wall-to-wall French cleat boards, a rolling tool chest, and a workbench leave a clear floor for project assembly. Lockable walk-in door keeps everything secure.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Tool Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed
Everyday tool shed
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed + seasonal storage
tool shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Tool Shed, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 tool shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Tool Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Tool Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 tool shed cost?

A 18×20 tool shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 tool shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 tool shed?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 tool shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 tool shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 tool shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 tool shed.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 tool shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 tool shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 tool shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 tool shed typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
18x20 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 360 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

18×20 Tool Shed

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
18x20 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 360 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Zero-turn, push mower, string trimmer, and gas cans all live in one steel-walled building rated for the long haul, the 8 ft roll-up clears most residential mower decks and concrete anchors survive wind events that.

You’re viewing:Mower & Outdoor Power Storage·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 8×8 Roll-Up
  • Hurricane Optional
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-MOWER-OUTDOOR-POBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Zero-turn, push mower, string trimmer, and gas cans all live in one steel-walled building rated for the long haul, the 8 ft roll-up clears most residential mower decks and concrete anchors survive wind events that flatten plastic sheds.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft shop

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage layout.

Zero-turn, push mower, string trimmer, and gas cans all live in one steel-walled building rated for the long haul, the 8 ft roll-up clears most residential mower decks and concrete anchors survive wind events that flatten plastic sheds. Small property owners pick this layout to keep gasoline equipment out of the main garage and away from the house.

💡 Pro tip:Mower & Outdoor Power Storage works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mower & Outdoor Power Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mower & Outdoor Power Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday mower & outdoor power storage
Everyday mower & outdoor power storage
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mower & outdoor power storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmower & outdoor power storage + seasonal storage
mower & outdoor power storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mower & Outdoor Power Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mower & Outdoor Power Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mower & Outdoor Power Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

🏡 18×20

Motorcycle & Toy Garage

18×20 motorcycle & toy garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Toy Garage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage cost?

A 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud mower & outdoor power storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mower & outdoor power storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 mower & outdoor power storage typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Mower & Outdoor Power Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
18x20 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 360 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

18×20 Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
18x20 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 360 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage | Steel and Stud, From $5,300

12

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,050$5,300SAVE $750
or $110/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×20Motorcycle & Toy Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Riders use 360 sq ft for two motorcycles, a UTV, jet ski trailer, or a classic project car under tarp. The 18 ft width gives room to walk between bikes without bar bumps. Lockable walk-in door and reinforced anchor.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle & Toy Garage·Size18×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,300$6,050Save $750
or as low as $110/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×20
18×20
this size
$5,300
18×26
longer
$6,900
20×20
wider
$5,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 360 sq ft enclosed
  • Reinforced Anchors
  • Walk-In Door
  • Theft Deterrent
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X20-MOTORCYCLE-TOY-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage.

18 feet wide × 20 feet long. Riders use 360 sq ft for two motorcycles, a UTV, jet ski trailer, or a classic project car under tarp.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 20′ · 360 sq ft

Motorcycle & Toy Garage layout.

Riders use 360 sq ft for two motorcycles, a UTV, jet ski trailer, or a classic project car under tarp. The 18 ft width gives room to walk between bikes without bar bumps. Lockable walk-in door and reinforced anchor pattern keep your toys where you left them.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle & Toy Garage works well at 18×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & Toy Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
360 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & Toy Garage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space360 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & Toy Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & toy garage
Everyday motorcycle & toy garage
360 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & toy garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & toy garage + seasonal storage
motorcycle & toy garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage, what makes it different.

360sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$110/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $110/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×20?

360 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 20′ footprint with 360 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,880–$4,320 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & Toy Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & Toy Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,620+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & Toy Garage also viewed:

🏡 18×20

One-Car Garage

18×20 one-car garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage →

🏡 18×20

Backyard Workshop

18×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 18×20

Storage Shed

18×20 storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Shed →

🏡 18×20

Garden Shed

18×20 garden shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed →

🏡 18×20

Home Office

18×20 home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office →

🏡 18×20

Hobby Room

18×20 hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room →

🏡 18×20

Tool Shed

18×20 tool shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed →

🏡 18×20

Mower & Outdoor Power Storage

18×20 mower & outdoor power storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mower & Outdoor Power Storage →

🎯 18×20

Pool House

18×20 pool house configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House →

🏡 18×20

Garage with Loft

18×20 garage with loft configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garage with Loft →

🏡 18×20

Carport Replacement

18×20 carport replacement configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport Replacement →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & Toy Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage cost?

A 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $110/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle & toy garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage?

Almost always for 360+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & toy garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $110/month on a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage.

What warranty comes with the 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×20 motorcycle & toy garage typically adds $2,880–$4,320 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & Toy Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
18x20 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 360 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

18×20 Motorcycle & Toy Garage

360 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

18′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×20 steel building delivers 360 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x35 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 700 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Two-Car Detached Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners pick this footprint when a standard 20×35 feels cramped. Park two F-150s nose-to-tail with 13 feet left over for a workbench, tool chest, and bike storage. Side-by-side parking works too with a 12-foot or.

You’re viewing:Two-Car Detached Garage·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 two-car detached garage.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Homeowners pick this footprint when a standard 20×35 feels cramped.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

Two-Car Detached Garage layout.

Homeowners pick this footprint when a standard 20×35 feels cramped. Park two F-150s nose-to-tail with 13 feet left over for a workbench, tool chest, and bike storage. Side-by-side parking works too with a 12-foot or 16-foot roll-up. Two walk-in doors keep daily traffic off the main bay.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Car Detached Garage works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car detached garage
Everyday two-car detached garage
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car detached garage + seasonal storage
two-car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 two-car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 two-car detached garage cost?

A 20×35 two-car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 two-car detached garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two-car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 two-car detached garage?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 two-car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 two-car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 two-car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 two-car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 two-car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 two-car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×35 two-car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×35 two-car detached garage typically adds $5,600–$8,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x35 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 700 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×35 Two-Car Detached Garage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x35 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 700 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Three-Car Compact Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Rural property owners with three drivers in the household order this size to fit three compact cars or two sedans plus a motorcycle. The 35-foot length swallows a Civic, Corolla, and Mazda3 with door-swing room. Spec a.

You’re viewing:Three-Car Compact Garage·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • A-Frame Roof
  • 9×8 Roll-Ups
  • 3-Car Capable
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-THREE-CAR-COMPACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 three-car compact garage.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Rural property owners with three drivers in the household order this size to fit three compact cars or two sedans plus a motorcycle.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

Three-Car Compact Garage layout.

Rural property owners with three drivers in the household order this size to fit three compact cars or two sedans plus a motorcycle. The 35-foot length swallows a Civic, Corolla, and Mazda3 with door-swing room. Spec a 20×35 roll-up on each gable for pull-through, or one 16-foot opening for side parking.

💡 Pro tip:Three-Car Compact Garage works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Three-Car Compact Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Three-Car Compact Garage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Three-Car Compact Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday three-car compact garage
Everyday three-car compact garage
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three-car compact garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWthree-car compact garage + seasonal storage
three-car compact garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 three-car compact garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Three-Car Compact Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Three-Car Compact Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Three-Car Compact Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Three-Car Compact Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 three-car compact garage cost?

A 20×35 three-car compact garage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 three-car compact garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud three-car compact garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 three-car compact garage?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud three-car compact garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 three-car compact garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 three-car compact garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 three-car compact garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 three-car compact garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 three-car compact garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 three-car compact garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×35 three-car compact garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×35 three-car compact garage typically adds $5,600–$8,400 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Three-Car Compact Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x35 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 700 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×35 Three-Car Compact Garage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x35 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 700 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop | Steel and Stud, From $12,200

12

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$13,900$12,200SAVE $1,700
or $254/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Workshop and Detached Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Tradespeople, woodworkers, and welders spec this as a working detached shop. 700 sq ft holds a table saw, miter station, drill press, MIG welder, and a 20×35 assembly bench without crowding. Add R-19 fiberglass batt.

You’re viewing:Workshop and Detached Shop·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,200$13,900Save $1,700
or as low as $254/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$11,300
20×35
this size
$12,200
20×36
longer
$12,500
22×35
wider
$13,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Insulated
  • R-19 Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-WORKSHOP-DETACHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 workshop and detached shop.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Tradespeople, woodworkers, and welders spec this as a working detached shop.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft

Workshop and Detached Shop layout.

Tradespeople, woodworkers, and welders spec this as a working detached shop. 700 sq ft holds a table saw, miter station, drill press, MIG welder, and a 20×35 assembly bench without crowding. Add R-19 fiberglass batt insulation, a 36-inch walk-in, and two 20×35 windows for cross-ventilation and natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Workshop and Detached Shop works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop and Detached Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop and Detached Shop spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop and Detached Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop and detached shop
Everyday workshop and detached shop
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop and detached shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop and detached shop + seasonal storage
workshop and detached shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$254/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 workshop and detached shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $254/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop and Detached Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop and Detached Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop and Detached Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop and Detached Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 workshop and detached shop cost?

A 20×35 workshop and detached shop from Steel and Stud starts at $12,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $254/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 workshop and detached shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop and detached shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 workshop and detached shop?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop and detached shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 workshop and detached shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 workshop and detached shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 workshop and detached shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $254/month on a 20×35 workshop and detached shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 workshop and detached shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 workshop and detached shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×35 workshop and detached shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop and Detached Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$12,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x35 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 700 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×35 Workshop and Detached Shop

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x35 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 700 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Man Cave and She Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Homeowners finishing out a hangout space wainscot the lower 4 feet, drop in two 20×35 windows, and add French doors for curb appeal. The 700 sq ft fits a pool table, bar, sectional, and TV wall, or a craft studio with.

You’re viewing:Man Cave and She Shed·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • French Doors
  • Insulated Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 man cave and she shed.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Homeowners finishing out a hangout space wainscot the lower 4 feet, drop in two 20×35 windows, and add French doors for curb appeal.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 35′ · 700 ground + loft

Man Cave and She Shed layout.

Homeowners finishing out a hangout space wainscot the lower 4 feet, drop in two 20×35 windows, and add French doors for curb appeal. The 700 sq ft fits a pool table, bar, sectional, and TV wall, or a craft studio with cutting tables, shelving, and a reading nook. Insulate with R-13 vapor barrier minimum.

💡 Pro tip:Man Cave and She Shed works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Man Cave and She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave and She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave and She Shed spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave and She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave and she shed
Everyday man cave and she shed
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave and she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave and she shed + seasonal storage
man cave and she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 man cave and she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave and She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Man Cave and She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Man Cave and She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave and She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave and She Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

🎯 20×35

Boat and Toy Storage

20×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave and She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 man cave and she shed cost?

A 20×35 man cave and she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 man cave and she shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud man cave and she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 man cave and she shed?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave and she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 man cave and she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 man cave and she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 man cave and she shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 man cave and she shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 man cave and she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 man cave and she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×35 man cave and she shed for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave and she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave and She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x35 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 700 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×35 Man Cave and She Shed

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x35 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 700 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage | Steel and Stud, From $10,350

12

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,800$10,350SAVE $1,450
or $216/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings20×35Boat and Toy Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Lake-house owners park a 24-foot bowrider on the trailer, a Sea-Doo, and a side-by-side under one 20×35 metal building. The 35-foot length covers the trailer tongue. Order a 20×35 roll-up for the boat, a walk-in on the.

You’re viewing:Boat and Toy Storage·Size20×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$10,350$11,800Save $1,450
or as low as $216/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×35
20×32
smaller
$9,450
20×35
this size
$10,350
20×36
longer
$10,650
22×35
wider
$11,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 700 sq ft enclosed
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Asphalt Anchors
  • Boat + Toys
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X35-BOAT-TOY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 20×35 boat and toy storage.

20 feet wide × 35 feet long. Lake-house owners park a 24-foot bowrider on the trailer, a Sea-Doo, and a side-by-side under one 20×35 metal building.

RV BAYDaily Driver20′ × 35′ · 700 sq ft · tall walls

Boat and Toy Storage layout.

Lake-house owners park a 24-foot bowrider on the trailer, a Sea-Doo, and a side-by-side under one 20×35 metal building. The 35-foot length covers the trailer tongue. Order a 20×35 roll-up for the boat, a walk-in on the side for daily access, and asphalt anchors if it sits on a paved pad.

💡 Pro tip:Boat and Toy Storage works well at 20×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×35 Boat and Toy Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat and Toy Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
700 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat and Toy Storage spec sheet.

Width20′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space700 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat and Toy Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat and toy storage
Everyday boat and toy storage
700 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat and toy storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat and toy storage + seasonal storage
boat and toy storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage, what makes it different.

700sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$216/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×35 boat and toy storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $216/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×35?

700 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 35′ footprint with 700 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,600–$8,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat and Toy Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 20×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×35 Boat and Toy Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×35 Boat and Toy Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat and Toy Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$3,150+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat and Toy Storage also viewed:

🏡 20×35

Two-Car Detached Garage

20×35 two-car detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Car Detached Garage →

🏡 20×35

Three-Car Compact Garage

20×35 three-car compact garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Three-Car Compact Garage →

🎯 20×35

RV Cover and Carport

20×35 rv cover and carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover and Carport →

🏢 20×35

Workshop and Detached Shop

20×35 workshop and detached shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop and Detached Shop →

🌾 20×35

Hobby Farm Equipment Shed

20×35 hobby farm equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Shed →

🌾 20×35

Two-Stall Horse Barn

20×35 two-stall horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Two-Stall Horse Barn →

🏡 20×35

Storage Building

20×35 storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Storage Building →

🎯 20×35

Man Cave and She Shed

20×35 man cave and she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave and She Shed →

🏢 20×35

Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover

20×35 contractor storage and job trailer cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage and Job Trailer Cover →

🌾 20×35

Round-Bale and Grain Storage

20×35 round-bale and grain storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Round-Bale and Grain Storage →

🏭 20×35

Small Fabrication and Welding Shop

20×35 small fabrication and welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Fabrication and Welding Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat and Toy Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×35 boat and toy storage cost?

A 20×35 boat and toy storage from Steel and Stud starts at $10,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $216/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×35 boat and toy storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud boat and toy storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×35 boat and toy storage?

Almost always for 700+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat and toy storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×35 boat and toy storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×35 boat and toy storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×35 boat and toy storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $216/month on a 20×35 boat and toy storage.

What warranty comes with the 20×35 boat and toy storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×35 boat and toy storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×35 boat and toy storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat and toy storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat and Toy Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x35 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 700 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×35 Boat and Toy Storage

700 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

20′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×35 steel building delivers 700 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$10,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x30 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 3,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

100′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×30 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $48,550

12

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$55,350$48,550SAVE $6,800
or $1011/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×30Mini-Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Small business owners launching a self-storage operation use the 100-ft length to divide into 10 or 20 individual bays with roll-up doors along one or both sides. The 30-ft depth fits standard 100×30 and 100×30 unit.

You’re viewing:Mini-Storage Facility·Size100×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$48,550$55,350Save $6,800
or as low as $1011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×30
100×30
this size
$48,550
100×40
longer
$75,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Multi-Bay Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X30-MINI-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×30 mini-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 30 feet long. Small business owners launching a self-storage operation use the 100-ft length to divide into 10 or 20 individual bays with roll-up doors along one or both sides.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 30′ · 3,000 sq ft shop

Mini-Storage Facility layout.

Small business owners launching a self-storage operation use the 100-ft length to divide into 10 or 20 individual bays with roll-up doors along one or both sides. The 30-ft depth fits standard 100×30 and 100×30 unit footprints with a center drive aisle. At 20 units renting for $75 to $100/month each, gross monthly revenue runs $1,500 to $2,000, paying off the building in 24 to 36 months at typical rural occupancy.

💡 Pro tip:Mini-Storage Facility works well at 100×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×30 Mini-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mini-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mini-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mini-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday mini-storage facility
Everyday mini-storage facility
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mini-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmini-storage facility + seasonal storage
mini-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×30 mini-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×30?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 30′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mini-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×30 Mini-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×30 Mini-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mini-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mini-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×30

Fleet Garage

100×30 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏭 100×30

Fabrication Shop

100×30 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 100×30

Barndominium Shell

100×30 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$46,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 100×30

Equipment Storage Barn

100×30 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 100×30

Auto Repair Shop

100×30 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 100×30

Warehouse

100×30 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🌾 100×30

Horse Barn

100×30 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 100×30

Hobbyist Workshop

100×30 hobbyist workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobbyist Workshop →

🏢 100×30

Commercial Garage

100×30 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🌾 100×30

Hay & Feed Barn

100×30 hay & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Barn →

🎯 100×30

Event & Recreation Space

100×30 event & recreation space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$46,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event & Recreation Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mini-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×30 mini-storage facility cost?

A 100×30 mini-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $48,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×30 mini-storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud mini-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×30 mini-storage facility?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mini-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×30 mini-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×30 mini-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×30 mini-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1011/month on a 100×30 mini-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×30 mini-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×30 mini-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×30 mini-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Mini-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$48,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x30 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 3,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×30 Mini-Storage Facility

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

100′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×30 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$48,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x30 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 3,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×30 Fleet Garage

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

100′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×30 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×30 Fleet Garage | Steel and Stud, From $48,550

12

100×30 Fleet Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$55,350$48,550SAVE $6,800
or $1011/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×30Fleet Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×30 Fleet Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Contractors and service companies park 8 to 10 work trucks bumper-to-bumper down the 100-ft run, with 12-ft to 16-ft legs clearing ladder racks and bucket booms. One 100×30 roll-up at the gable end lets the lead truck.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage·Size100×30·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$48,550$55,350Save $6,800
or as low as $1011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×30
100×30
this size
$48,550
100×40
longer
$75,050
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 3,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 16′ Legs
  • 8-10 Truck Capacity
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X30-FLEET-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×30 fleet garage.

100 feet wide × 30 feet long. Contractors and service companies park 8 to 10 work trucks bumper-to-bumper down the 100-ft run, with 12-ft to 16-ft legs clearing ladder racks and bucket booms.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area100′ × 30′ · 3,000 sq ft

Fleet Garage layout.

Contractors and service companies park 8 to 10 work trucks bumper-to-bumper down the 100-ft run, with 12-ft to 16-ft legs clearing ladder racks and bucket booms. One 100×30 roll-up at the gable end lets the lead truck pull through. Beats outdoor parking on insurance alone.

💡 Pro tip:Fleet Garage works well at 100×30, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×30 Fleet Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
3,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×30 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage spec sheet.

Width100′
Length30′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space3,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage
Everyday fleet garage
3,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage + seasonal storage
fleet garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×30 Fleet Garage, what makes it different.

3,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×30 fleet garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×30?

3,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 30′ footprint with 3,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $24,000–$36,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×30 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×30 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×30 Fleet Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×30 Fleet Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×31×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$13,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage also viewed:

🏢 100×30

Mini-Storage Facility

100×30 mini-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mini-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×30

Fabrication Shop

100×30 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏡 100×30

Barndominium Shell

100×30 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$46,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 100×30

Equipment Storage Barn

100×30 equipment storage barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Storage Barn →

🏢 100×30

Auto Repair Shop

100×30 auto repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Repair Shop →

🏭 100×30

Warehouse

100×30 warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse →

🌾 100×30

Horse Barn

100×30 horse barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn →

🏭 100×30

Hobbyist Workshop

100×30 hobbyist workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobbyist Workshop →

🏢 100×30

Commercial Garage

100×30 commercial garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$48,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Garage →

🌾 100×30

Hay & Feed Barn

100×30 hay & feed barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$47,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Feed Barn →

🎯 100×30

Event & Recreation Space

100×30 event & recreation space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$46,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event & Recreation Space →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 100×30 fleet garage cost?

A 100×30 fleet garage from Steel and Stud starts at $48,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×30 fleet garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×30 fleet garage?

Almost always for 3,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×30 fleet garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×30 fleet garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×30 fleet garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1011/month on a 100×30 fleet garage.

What warranty comes with the 100×30 fleet garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×30 fleet garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×30 fleet garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$48,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x30 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 3,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×30 Fleet Garage

3,000 sq ft for workshop, fabrication shop, or barndominium

100′ x 30′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×30 steel building delivers 3,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$48,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x100 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 10,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations | Steel and Stud, From $174,500

12

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$198,950$174,500SAVE $24,450
or $3635/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×100Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, built for daily backyard use.

10,000 sq ft fleet garage for 30 to 45 work trucks, vans, service trailers, or municipal vehicles under one engineered roof. Multiple 100×100 roll-ups along the long wall keep crew mornings moving without bottlenecks at.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations·Size100×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$174,500$198,950Save $24,450
or as low as $3635/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×100
100×90
smaller
$164,750
100×100
this size
$174,500
100×110
longer
$201,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 10,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $54,500
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X100-FLEET-GARAGE-VEHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

100 feet wide × 100 feet long. 10,000 sq ft fleet garage for 30 to 45 work trucks, vans, service trailers, or municipal vehicles under one engineered roof.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area100′ × 100′ · 10,000 sq ft

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations layout.

10,000 sq ft fleet garage for 30 to 45 work trucks, vans, service trailers, or municipal vehicles under one engineered roof. Multiple 100×100 roll-ups along the long wall keep crew mornings moving without bottlenecks at the door.

💡 Pro tip:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations works well at 100×100, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
10,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations spec sheet.

Width100′
Length100′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space10,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage / vehicle operations
Everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations
10,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage / vehicle operations.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
fleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, what makes it different.

10,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3635/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3635/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×100?

10,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 100′ footprint with 10,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $80,000–$120,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$45,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations also viewed:

🏭 100×100

Manufacturing Floor

100×100 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 100×100

Distribution Hub

100×100 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 100×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

100×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 100×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

100×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 100×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

100×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$174,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 100×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

100×100 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 100×100

Trucking Terminal

100×100 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 100×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

100×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 100×100

Municipal / Government Facility

100×100 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 100×100

Indoor Riding Arena

100×100 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$175,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 100×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

100×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$176,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations questions, answered.

How much does a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations cost?

A 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations from Steel and Stud starts at $174,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3635/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Almost always for 10,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3635/month on a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

What warranty comes with the 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations typically adds $80,000–$120,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$174,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x100 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 10,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

10,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×100 steel building delivers 10,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$174,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 11,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×110 Commercial Workshop

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $203,200

12

100×110 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Commercial Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×110 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door. It’s a.

You’re viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$176,350
100×110
this size
$203,200
100×120
longer
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 4-Bay Layout
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 commercial workshop.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. 100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft

Commercial Workshop layout.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×110 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door. It’s a proven layout for leasing to auto repair, welding, woodworking, and small fab shops. Pre-frame the partitions in the 3D builder so you can drop steel-stud walls later.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Workshop works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Commercial Workshop, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×110 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 commercial workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 11,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×110 Commercial Workshop

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 11,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud, From $203,600

12

100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$232,100$203,600SAVE $28,500
or $4242/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Truck & Fleet Service Center

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space. The 100-foot length fits a tractor-trailer plus tool cabinets and a parts mezzanine. Spec 100×110 roll-ups on both long walls for true.

You’re viewing:Truck & Fleet Service Center·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,600$232,100Save $28,500
or as low as $4242/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$176,750
100×110
this size
$203,600
100×120
longer
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Pull-Through Bays
  • 14×14 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 truck & fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. 100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft

Truck & Fleet Service Center layout.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space. The 100-foot length fits a tractor-trailer plus tool cabinets and a parts mezzanine. Spec 100×110 roll-ups on both long walls for true drive-through service.

💡 Pro tip:Truck & Fleet Service Center works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck & Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck & Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck & Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck & fleet service center
Everyday truck & fleet service center
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck & fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4242/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 truck & fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4242/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck & Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck & Fleet Service Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck & Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck & Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 truck & fleet service center cost?

A 100×110 truck & fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $203,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4242/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 truck & fleet service center price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 truck & fleet service center?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 truck & fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 truck & fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 truck & fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4242/month on a 100×110 truck & fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 truck & fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 truck & fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 truck & fleet service center handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×110 truck & fleet service center ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck & Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$203,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 11,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×110 Truck & Fleet Service Center

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 11,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×110 Self-Storage Facility

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×110 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $203,200

12

100×110 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×110Self-Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant self-storage facility space. Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle. Pre-framed openings on 10-foot.

You’re viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×100
smaller
$176,350
100×110
this size
$203,200
100×120
longer
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • Climate-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×110 self-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. 100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant self-storage facility space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft shop

Self-Storage Facility layout.

100×110 delivers 11000 sq ft of code-compliant self-storage facility space. Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle. Pre-framed openings on 10-foot centers along both long walls let you drop interior partitions per your unit mix. Lower eaves keep the heated/cooled volume manageable for HVAC.

💡 Pro tip:Self-Storage Facility works well at 100×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Self-Storage Facility, what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Regional Distribution Center →

🏭 100×110

Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay

100×110 manufacturing facility with crane bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility with Crane Bay →

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →

🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →

🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →

🏭 100×110

Cold Storage Warehouse

100×110 cold storage warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Warehouse →

🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →

🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →

🏭 100×110

Fabrication & Welding Shop

100×110 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →

🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →

🏛️ 100×110

Church or Community Center

100×110 church or community center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church or Community Center →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×110 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 self-storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 11,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×110 Self-Storage Facility

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 4,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×40 Mini-Storage Facility

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×40 Mini-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $75,050

12

100×40 Mini-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$85,550$75,050SAVE $10,500
or $1564/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×40Mini-Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Mini-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 100×40 mini-storage facility? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Small business owners launching a self-storage operation use the 100-ft length to divide into.

You’re viewing:Mini-Storage Facility·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,050$85,550Save $10,500
or as low as $1564/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×30
smaller
$48,550
100×40
this size
$75,050
100×50
longer
$93,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Multi-Bay Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-MINI-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×40 mini-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. Looking for a 100×40 mini-storage facility? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft shop

Mini-Storage Facility layout.

Looking for a 100×40 mini-storage facility? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Small business owners launching a self-storage operation use the 100-ft length to divide into 10 or 20 individual bays with roll-up doors along one or both sides. The 30-ft depth fits standard 100×40 and 100×40 unit footprints with a center drive aisle. At 20 units renting for $75 to $100/month each, gross monthly revenue runs $1,500 to $2,000, paying off the building in 24 to 36 months at typical rural occupancy.

💡 Pro tip:Mini-Storage Facility works well at 100×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Mini-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mini-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mini-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mini-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday mini-storage facility
Everyday mini-storage facility
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mini-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmini-storage facility + seasonal storage
mini-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Mini-Storage Facility, what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1564/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 mini-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1564/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mini-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Mini-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Mini-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mini-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mini-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×40

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×40 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×40

Barndominium

100×40 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mini-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 mini-storage facility cost?

A 100×40 mini-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $75,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1564/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 mini-storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud mini-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 mini-storage facility?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mini-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 mini-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 mini-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 mini-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1564/month on a 100×40 mini-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 mini-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 mini-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×40 mini-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Mini-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$75,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 4,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×40 Mini-Storage Facility

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$75,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 4,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×40 Fleet Garage

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×40 Fleet Garage | Steel and Stud, From $75,050

12

100×40 Fleet Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$85,550$75,050SAVE $10,500
or $1564/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×40Fleet Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Fleet Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×40 delivers 4000 sq ft of code-compliant fleet garage space. Contractors and service companies park 8 to 10 work trucks bumper-to-bumper down the 100-ft run, with 12-ft to 16-ft legs clearing ladder racks and bucket.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,050$85,550Save $10,500
or as low as $1564/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×30
smaller
$48,550
100×40
this size
$75,050
100×50
longer
$93,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 16′ Legs
  • 8-10 Truck Capacity
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-FLEET-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×40 fleet garage.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. 100×40 delivers 4000 sq ft of code-compliant fleet garage space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft

Fleet Garage layout.

100×40 delivers 4000 sq ft of code-compliant fleet garage space. Contractors and service companies park 8 to 10 work trucks bumper-to-bumper down the 100-ft run, with 12-ft to 16-ft legs clearing ladder racks and bucket booms. One 100×40 roll-up at the gable end lets the lead truck pull through. Beats outdoor parking on insurance alone.

💡 Pro tip:Fleet Garage works well at 100×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Fleet Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage spec sheet.

Width100′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage
Everyday fleet garage
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage + seasonal storage
fleet garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Fleet Garage, what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1564/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 fleet garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1564/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Fleet Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Fleet Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×40

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×40 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×40

Barndominium

100×40 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 fleet garage cost?

A 100×40 fleet garage from Steel and Stud starts at $75,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1564/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 fleet garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 fleet garage?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 fleet garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 fleet garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 fleet garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1564/month on a 100×40 fleet garage.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 fleet garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 fleet garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×40 fleet garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$75,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 4,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×40 Fleet Garage

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$75,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 4,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×40 Equipment Storage Barn

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×40 Equipment Storage Barn | Steel and Stud, From $73,850

12

100×40 Equipment Storage Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$84,200$73,850SAVE $10,350
or $1539/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×40Equipment Storage Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Equipment Storage Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 100×40 equipment storage barn? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Farmers store combines, planters, sprayers, and hay wagons end-to-end down the 100-ft length.

You’re viewing:Equipment Storage Barn·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$73,850$84,200Save $10,350
or as low as $1539/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×30
smaller
$47,350
100×40
this size
$73,850
100×50
longer
$92,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Galvalume
  • Implement Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-EQUIPMENT-STORAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×40 equipment storage barn.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. Looking for a 100×40 equipment storage barn? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft

Equipment Storage Barn layout.

Looking for a 100×40 equipment storage barn? At 4000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Farmers store combines, planters, sprayers, and hay wagons end-to-end down the 100-ft length, with 14-ft legs clearing tall implement towers. Open-gable or sliding barn door access lets you pull the longest tool in first and back out anything else when needed. Galvalume finish keeps cost down.

💡 Pro tip:Equipment Storage Barn works well at 100×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Equipment Storage Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Storage Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Storage Barn spec sheet.

Width100′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Storage Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment storage barn
Everyday equipment storage barn
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment storage barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment storage barn + seasonal storage
equipment storage barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Equipment Storage Barn, what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1539/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 equipment storage barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1539/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Storage Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Equipment Storage Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Equipment Storage Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Storage Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Storage Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×40

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×40 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×40

Barndominium

100×40 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Storage Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 equipment storage barn cost?

A 100×40 equipment storage barn from Steel and Stud starts at $73,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1539/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 equipment storage barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment storage barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 equipment storage barn?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment storage barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 equipment storage barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 equipment storage barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 equipment storage barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1539/month on a 100×40 equipment storage barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 equipment storage barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 equipment storage barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×40 equipment storage barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Storage Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$73,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 4,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×40 Equipment Storage Barn

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$73,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 4,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×40 Hobbyist Workshop

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×40 Hobbyist Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $75,450

12

100×40 Hobbyist Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$86,000$75,450SAVE $10,550
or $1572/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×40Hobbyist Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Hobbyist Workshop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 100×40 hobbyist workshop fits 100-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Serious hobbyists and home mechanics order the 100×40 workshop kit when a 40-ft.

You’re viewing:Hobbyist Workshop·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,450$86,000Save $10,550
or as low as $1572/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×30
smaller
$48,950
100×40
this size
$75,450
100×50
longer
$93,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Boxed Eave
  • 60-ft Bench Wall
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-HOBBYIST-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×40 hobbyist workshop.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. Our 100×40 hobbyist workshop fits 100-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft

Hobbyist Workshop layout.

Our 100×40 hobbyist workshop fits 100-foot widths and 40-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Serious hobbyists and home mechanics order the 100×40 workshop kit when a 40-ft shop already feels cramped. Run a 60-ft assembly bench down one side wall, leave the other half open for a project car or boat. 12-ft legs handle a hoist; 14-ft legs handle a lift.

💡 Pro tip:Hobbyist Workshop works well at 100×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Hobbyist Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobbyist Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobbyist Workshop spec sheet.

Width100′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobbyist Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday hobbyist workshop
Everyday hobbyist workshop
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobbyist workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobbyist workshop + seasonal storage
hobbyist workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Hobbyist Workshop, what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1572/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 hobbyist workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1572/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobbyist Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Hobbyist Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Hobbyist Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobbyist Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobbyist Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×40

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×40 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×40

Barndominium

100×40 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobbyist Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 hobbyist workshop cost?

A 100×40 hobbyist workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $75,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1572/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 hobbyist workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobbyist workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 hobbyist workshop?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobbyist workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 hobbyist workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 hobbyist workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 hobbyist workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1572/month on a 100×40 hobbyist workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 hobbyist workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 hobbyist workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×40 hobbyist workshop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×40 hobbyist workshop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Hobbyist Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$75,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 4,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×40 Hobbyist Workshop

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$75,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 4,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×40 Commercial Garage

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×40 Commercial Garage | Steel and Stud, From $75,050

12

100×40 Commercial Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$85,550$75,050SAVE $10,500
or $1564/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×40Commercial Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×40 Commercial Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×40 delivers 4000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial garage space. Drive-through configuration with one roll-up per gable lets you pull a sedan straight through without backing up. Permit-ready engineered drawings.

You’re viewing:Commercial Garage·Size100×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$75,050$85,550Save $10,500
or as low as $1564/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×40
100×30
smaller
$48,550
100×40
this size
$75,050
100×50
longer
$93,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Drive-Through
  • Permit-Ready Drawings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X40-COMMERCIAL-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×40 commercial garage.

100 feet wide × 40 feet long. 100×40 delivers 4000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial garage space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area100′ × 40′ · 4,000 sq ft

Commercial Garage layout.

100×40 delivers 4000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial garage space. Drive-through configuration with one roll-up per gable lets you pull a sedan straight through without backing up. Permit-ready engineered drawings included.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Garage works well at 100×40, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×40 Commercial Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Garage spec sheet.

Width100′
Length40′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial garage
Everyday commercial garage
4,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial garage + seasonal storage
commercial garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×40 Commercial Garage, what makes it different.

4,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1564/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×40 commercial garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1564/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×40?

4,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 40′ footprint with 4,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $32,000–$48,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×40 Commercial Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×40 Commercial Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Garage also viewed:

🏢 100×40

Commercial Warehouse

100×40 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×40

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×40 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×40

Barndominium

100×40 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×40

Fabrication Shop

100×40 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×40

Horse Riding Arena

100×40 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×40

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×40 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×40

RV & Boat Storage

100×40 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×40

Self-Storage Facility

100×40 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×40

Church & Event Hall

100×40 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×40

Livestock Barn

100×40 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×40

Indoor Sports Facility

100×40 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$73,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

🏭 100×40

Cold Storage Building

100×40 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$75,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 100×40 commercial garage cost?

A 100×40 commercial garage from Steel and Stud starts at $75,050 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1564/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×40 commercial garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×40 commercial garage?

Almost always for 4,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×40 commercial garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×40 commercial garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×40 commercial garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1564/month on a 100×40 commercial garage.

What warranty comes with the 100×40 commercial garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×40 commercial garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×40 commercial garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$75,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x40 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 4,000 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

100×40 Commercial Garage

4,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×40 steel building delivers 4,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$75,050.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
10x12 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 120 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

10×12 Tool Shed for Hobbyists

120 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×12 steel building delivers 120 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×12 Tool Shed for Hobbyists | Steel and Stud, From $1,750

12

10×12 Tool Shed for Hobbyists
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,000$1,750SAVE $250
or $36/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×12Tool Shed for Hobbyists

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×12 Tool Shed for Hobbyists, built for daily backyard use.

10×12 delivers 120 sq ft of everyday tool shed for hobbyists space. The 10×12 steel shed framing accepts French cleats anywhere along the studs, which a stamped tin big-box shed won’t.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed for Hobbyists·Size10×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,750$2,000Save $250
or as low as $36/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×12
10×10
smaller
$1,500
10×12
this size
$1,750
10×20
longer
$2,950
12×12
wider
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 120 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • Insulation Ready
  • Roll-Up Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X12-TOOL-SHED-HOBBYIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×12 tool shed for hobbyists.

10 feet wide × 12 feet long. 10×12 delivers 120 sq ft of everyday tool shed for hobbyists space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 12′ · 120 sq ft

Tool Shed for Hobbyists layout.

10×12 delivers 120 sq ft of everyday tool shed for hobbyists space. The 10×12 steel shed framing accepts French cleats anywhere along the studs, which a stamped tin big-box shed won’t.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed for Hobbyists works well at 10×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×12 Tool Shed for Hobbyists in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed for Hobbyists.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
120 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed for Hobbyists spec sheet.

Width10′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space120 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed for Hobbyists.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed for hobbyists
Everyday tool shed for hobbyists
120 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed for hobbyists.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed for hobbyists + seasonal storage
tool shed for hobbyists + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×12 Tool Shed for Hobbyists, what makes it different.

120sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$36/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×12 tool shed for hobbyists is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $36/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×12?

120 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 12′ footprint with 120 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $960–$1,440 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed for Hobbyists shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×12 Tool Shed for Hobbyists buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×12 Tool Shed for Hobbyists

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed for Hobbyists · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$540+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed for Hobbyists also viewed:

🏡 10×12

Backyard Storage Shed

10×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

10×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 10×12

Garden Shed with Windows

10×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 10×12

Backyard Home Office

10×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

10×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 10×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

10×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 10×12

Bike & Sports Storage

10×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 10×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 10×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

10×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 10×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

10×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 10×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

10×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 10×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

10×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed for Hobbyists questions, answered.

How much does a 10×12 tool shed for hobbyists cost?

A 10×12 tool shed for hobbyists from Steel and Stud starts at $1,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $36/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×12 tool shed for hobbyists price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed for hobbyists ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×12 tool shed for hobbyists?

Almost always for 120+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed for hobbyists different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×12 tool shed for hobbyists need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×12 tool shed for hobbyists delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×12 tool shed for hobbyists without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $36/month on a 10×12 tool shed for hobbyists.

What warranty comes with the 10×12 tool shed for hobbyists?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×12 tool shed for hobbyists in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×12 tool shed for hobbyists add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×12 tool shed for hobbyists typically adds $960–$1,440 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed for Hobbyists quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
10x12 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 120 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

10×12 Tool Shed for Hobbyists

120 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×12 steel building delivers 120 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
10x12 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 120 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

10×12 Motorcycle & ATV Garage

120 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×12 steel building delivers 120 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×12 Motorcycle & ATV Garage | Steel and Stud, From $1,750

12

10×12 Motorcycle & ATV Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,000$1,750SAVE $250
or $36/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×12Motorcycle & ATV Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×12 Motorcycle & ATV Garage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage? At 120 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Two motorcycles park nose-to-tail with a tool cart between them, or one ATV plus a riding.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle & ATV Garage·Size10×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,750$2,000Save $250
or as low as $36/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×12
10×10
smaller
$1,500
10×12
this size
$1,750
10×20
longer
$2,950
12×12
wider
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 120 sq ft enclosed
  • 8×7 Roll-Up
  • 9′ Sidewall
  • Lockable
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X12-MOTORCYCLE-ATV-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage.

10 feet wide × 12 feet long. Looking for a 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage? At 120 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area10′ × 12′ · 120 sq ft

Motorcycle & ATV Garage layout.

Looking for a 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage? At 120 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Two motorcycles park nose-to-tail with a tool cart between them, or one ATV plus a riding mower fits if you stagger the angle. Roll-up door at 8’x7′ clears handlebars; a walk-in side door means you don’t have to open the big door for a quick grab.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle & ATV Garage works well at 10×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×12 Motorcycle & ATV Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & ATV Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
120 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & ATV Garage spec sheet.

Width10′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space120 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & ATV Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & atv garage
Everyday motorcycle & atv garage
120 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & atv garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & atv garage + seasonal storage
motorcycle & atv garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×12 Motorcycle & ATV Garage, what makes it different.

120sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$36/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $36/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×12?

120 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 12′ footprint with 120 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $960–$1,440 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & ATV Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×12 Motorcycle & ATV Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×12 Motorcycle & ATV Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & ATV Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$540+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & ATV Garage also viewed:

🏡 10×12

Backyard Storage Shed

10×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

10×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 10×12

Garden Shed with Windows

10×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 10×12

Backyard Home Office

10×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

10×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 10×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

10×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 10×12

Bike & Sports Storage

10×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 10×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 10×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

10×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 10×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

10×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 10×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

10×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 10×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

10×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & ATV Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage cost?

A 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage from Steel and Stud starts at $1,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $36/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle & atv garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage?

Almost always for 120+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & atv garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $36/month on a 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage.

What warranty comes with the 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 10×12 motorcycle & atv garage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a motorcycle & atv garage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & ATV Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
10x12 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 120 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

10×12 Motorcycle & ATV Garage

120 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×12 steel building delivers 120 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
10x12 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 120 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

10×12 Lawn Equipment Storage

120 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×12 steel building delivers 120 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×12 Lawn Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $1,750

12

10×12 Lawn Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,000$1,750SAVE $250
or $36/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×12Lawn Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×12 Lawn Equipment Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 10×12 lawn equipment storage packs 120 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Riding mower, push mower, trimmer, blower, gas cans, and a fertilizer spreader all fit.

You’re viewing:Lawn Equipment Storage·Size10×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$1,750$2,000Save $250
or as low as $36/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×12
10×10
smaller
$1,500
10×12
this size
$1,750
10×20
longer
$2,950
12×12
wider
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 120 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Ground Anchors
  • 29 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X12-LAWN-EQUIPMENT-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×12 lawn equipment storage.

10 feet wide × 12 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 10×12 lawn equipment storage packs 120 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack10′ × 12′ · 120 sq ft shop

Lawn Equipment Storage layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 10×12 lawn equipment storage packs 120 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Riding mower, push mower, trimmer, blower, gas cans, and a fertilizer spreader all fit with a 10×12 roll-up door for drive-in access. Concrete pad keeps tires clean; ground anchor option works if you’re saving the slab pour for next year.

💡 Pro tip:Lawn Equipment Storage works well at 10×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×12 Lawn Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Lawn Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
120 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lawn Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width10′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space120 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Lawn Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday lawn equipment storage
Everyday lawn equipment storage
120 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a lawn equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×12 Lawn Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

120sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$36/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×12 lawn equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $36/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×12?

120 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 12′ footprint with 120 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $960–$1,440 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Lawn Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×12 Lawn Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×12 Lawn Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Lawn Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$540+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Lawn Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 10×12

Backyard Storage Shed

10×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 10×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

10×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 10×12

Garden Shed with Windows

10×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 10×12

Backyard Home Office

10×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 10×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

10×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 10×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

10×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 10×12

Bike & Sports Storage

10×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 10×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

10×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 10×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

10×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 10×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

10×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 10×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

10×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 10×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

10×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$1,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Lawn Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×12 lawn equipment storage cost?

A 10×12 lawn equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $1,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $36/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×12 lawn equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud lawn equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×12 lawn equipment storage?

Almost always for 120+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud lawn equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×12 lawn equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×12 lawn equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×12 lawn equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $36/month on a 10×12 lawn equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 10×12 lawn equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×12 lawn equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×12 lawn equipment storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×12 lawn equipment storage typically adds $960–$1,440 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Lawn Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$1,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
10x12 metal building: hero render — building exterior view, 120 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

10×12 Lawn Equipment Storage

120 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

10′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×12 steel building delivers 120 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$1,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

NOT SURE WHICH SIZE? BUILD YOUR METAL GARAGE IN 3D AND SEE YOUR PRICE INSTANTLY

Flexible Payment Options

Finance Your Metal Garage

Three ways to own your enclosed steel garage building. No hidden fees. Balance due only after installation is complete.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

Metal Garages Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Garage

An enclosed prefabricated steel garage is the most durable and cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, tools, equipment and personal property. Here is why property owners across 48 states chose Steel and Stud.

🔒

Fully Enclosed Protection

Every metal garage comes with complete enclosure: steel roof panels, wall panels on all four sides, a standard garage door and a walk-in entry door. Your vehicles, tools and stored belongings stay protected from weather, theft and pests year round.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel garage order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees or subcontractor surprises. Confirm your site is level and the crew handles everything else.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. Enclosed garages especially benefit from 12-gauge because walls and doors create higher wind load requirements than open carports.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work with multiple manufacturers and cut out distributor markups. Our prefab steel garages typically cost 40 to 60 percent less than comparable stick-built, wood-frame or concrete block construction for the same footprint and clearance height.

🎨

Full 3D Customization

Use our free 3D building designer to configure every detail of your garage: door placement, window locations, lean-to additions, insulation, wainscot, 12 panel colors for roof, walls and trim, and certification options for your climate zone.

Engineered for Your Climate

All enclosed garage structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 140 MPH wind plus 25 PSF snow certification is available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

Verified Reviews

What Our Customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Metal Garages.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"We are very happy with our carport. Even though there was a delay with the installation due to weather, we are glad we went with Steel and Stud."

RG
Robert G.
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."

RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
Common Questions

Metal Garages FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Metal garage prices from Steel and Stud start at $6,775 for a standard 20x30x10 enclosed garage. Two-car garages (24x40) range from $9,135 to $16,500 depending on your state, roof style and gauge. Triple-wide garages (30x30 to 30x40) start around $10,688. All tubular steel garage prices include free delivery and professional installation.

Every tubular steel garage order includes full enclosure (roof, walls, and end panels), one standard garage door, one walk-in door, free delivery to your job site, and professional installation by a certified crew. You can add extra doors, windows, lean-tos, insulation and color upgrades through the 3D designer before ordering.

Yes. You can place garage doors on any wall (front, side, or back entry), add roll-up or sectional doors, include polycarbonate or diamond windows for natural light, choose from 12 panel colors, add lean-tos for covered parking, upgrade to insulated wall and roof panels, and select your preferred frame gauge and certification level.

A garage with lean-to combines a fully enclosed metal garage with an attached open or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. The lean-to provides additional covered area for outdoor parking, equipment storage, or a shaded work area without the cost of full wall enclosure. Lean-tos can be added to the left, right, front, or back of the main building.

A concrete slab is strongly recommended for enclosed metal garages. It provides a level floor surface, prevents moisture intrusion from the ground, and allows secure concrete anchor bolt attachment. Ground and gravel installations are available but better suited for open-sided structures. Contact us before pouring your slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement.

Most standard two-car metal garages (20x30 to 24x40) are assembled in one day by a professional crew. Larger triple-wide garages or structures with attached lean-tos may take up to two days. The lead time from order confirmation to installation date is typically 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location and seasonal demand.

12-gauge galvanized steel frames (2.5mm thick) are recommended for enclosed garages. Fully enclosed buildings handle more wind load and snow weight than open carports, and the thicker 12-gauge framing provides the structural integrity needed for long-term performance. 12-gauge frames also carry a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge (1.9mm) is available at a lower price for moderate climates.

Yes. Our 3D building designer allows you to place garage doors on any wall, including the long side walls. Side-entry garages are popular on narrow lots where the driveway runs parallel to the structure, or when you want the front wall facing the street without a visible garage door opening.

Yes. Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment with a deposit now and balance after install at zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing with competitive rates from $89/mo over 12 to 72 months and a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) as low as $49/mo with no credit check, first month as down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. View all financing options

Choose from 12 standard colors at no additional charge: Barn Red, Beige, Black, Brown, Burgundy, Burnished Slate, Clay, Galvalume, Green, Pewter Gray, Quaker Gray, Rawhide Tan, Royal Blue, Sandstone, Slate Blue, and White. You can select separate colors for the roof, walls, trim, and wainscot through the 3D designer. Color choices do not affect price or lead time.

Permit requirements vary by county and city. Contact your local building department before ordering to confirm setback requirements, maximum building height, and any engineering certification needs. Once plans are submitted, your deposit is non-refundable if a permit is denied for reasons other than the engineered plans themselves.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Metal Garage Sizes, Types and Dimensions Guide

Enclosed metal garage dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Standard garages range from 12 to 24 feet wide, with lengths from 21 to 100 feet in standard increments. Triple-wide garages span 26 to 30 feet for three-car or commercial layouts. Leg height starts at 6 feet and goes up to 30 feet for the tallest structures, with 10 and 12-foot clearance being the most common choices for residential enclosed garages.

Standard garages (20 to 24 feet wide, 20 to 40 feet long) are the most popular category and accommodate two vehicles with room for side storage, a workbench, or wall-mounted tool systems. A 20x30 garage provides roughly 600 square feet of enclosed space, while a 24x40 gives you 960 square feet of fully protected interior. Triple-wide garages (26 to 30 feet wide) are built for three or more vehicles, commercial fleet parking, or combined vehicle storage and workshop layouts.

Garage with lean-to configurations combine an enclosed garage with an attached open-sided or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. This design gives you the security of a locked enclosed garage for your primary vehicles while providing additional covered parking, equipment shelter, or a shaded outdoor workspace at a fraction of the cost of full enclosure.

How Much Does a Metal Garage Cost in 2026?

Metal garage prices in 2026 start at $9,775 for a standard 30x30x10 enclosed garage and go up to $21,000 or more for large triple-wide structures with lean-tos. All tubular steel garage prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation by a certified crew.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider garages carry heavier framing), Length (additional bays add cost proportionally), Leg Height (taller structures need reinforced legs), Roof Style (vertical adds approximately 15% over regular), Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds roughly 12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty), and Lean-To Additions (each lean-to adds roughly 20 to 30 percent to the base price depending on dimensions).

Prices also vary by state due to regional manufacturing and delivery logistics. Coastal and mountain states with higher certification requirements (140 MPH wind, 25 PSF snow load) carry higher base prices. Contact us with your ZIP code for an exact quote that reflects your specific location.

Choosing the Right Metal Garage for Your Property

Selecting the right enclosed steel garage depends on what you plan to store, how much workspace you need, and the physical constraints of your building site. A one-car garage (12 to 18 feet wide) works for a single vehicle, motorcycle collection, or dedicated workshop. A two-car garage (20 to 24 feet wide) is the most versatile option for residential properties, fitting two standard vehicles with room for seasonal storage. A three-car or triple-wide garage (26 to 30 feet wide) serves families with multiple vehicles, commercial operators storing fleet vehicles, or hobbyists who need a large workshop alongside vehicle bays.

Consider your door placement carefully. Front-entry garages with the door on the short wall are standard, but side-entry configurations are ideal for narrow lots, L-shaped driveways, or properties where you want the long wall to face the street for a cleaner appearance. Our 3D designer lets you place doors, windows and lean-tos exactly where you need them before ordering.

Metal Garage Installation: What to Expect

After placing your order and submitting your deposit, the manufacturer assigns a professional installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size, certification requirements, and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level concrete slab (strongly recommended for enclosed garages), clear vehicle access for the delivery truck, and any permits posted or available. The crew typically completes a standard 20x30 or 24x40 garage in one full day. Triple-wide garages and structures with lean-tos may take up to two days.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your garage is installed and you confirm satisfaction. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Need something different? Explore our full range: open Metal Barns from $1,195 for basic vehicle coverage, metal barns for agricultural storage and equestrian use, tall clearance RV covers for motorhomes and fifth-wheels, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and commercial steel buildings for warehouses, retail and industrial applications. Every category includes factory-direct pricing and professional installation on tubular steel orders.

READY TO SECURE YOUR VEHICLES WITH A METAL GARAGE?

Join 15,000+ property owners who trust our durable metal garages. Enjoy factory-direct pricing with free delivery and professional installation on all tubular steel buildings.

View Cart